Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial. 1 . Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

3 . Germany. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Add more detailed modelling elements. such as duct. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. fixtures. electrical. Add basic MEP elements. electrical panels. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and plumbing engineering workflows. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. and piping. such as mechanical equipment.

Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. as well as how to open and save them. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . NOTE Depending on your installation. and tags. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise. views. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. when you add ductwork. and sheets to document the project. templates. your Training folder may be in a different location. is located and accessed in the training files location. For example. Metric file names have an _m suffix. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. However. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. you learn where the training files are located. to provide a richer and more finished design. When you install the training files as instructed. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. For example. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Create detail views. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Metric: files for users working with metric units. however. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. You do not design entire systems. On the Contents tab. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. So. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you can choose to save your work. After completing each exercise. such as templates and families. annotations. Create schedules. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. When you open a training file. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise.

and click Save. if you open settings. select the folder in which to save the new file. a list of file types displays. the Open dialog displays. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. You may close the file with or without saving changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. and click the Training Files icon. Accessing Training Files | 5 . you are prompted to save the changes. verify that Project Files (*. and you can open any supported file type. scroll down. and click Open. 3 In the right pane.rvt and make changes. 8 If you have made changes. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. click ➤ Save As. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. For example. double-click Imperial or Metric. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. enter the new file name.rvt.rvt) is selected. 4 Click the training file name. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. For File name. For Files of type. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.

6 .

quantities. scope. In mathematics and mechanical CAD.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. In this case. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. drawings. sections. If you move the partition. 2D and 3D view. ■ ■ 7 . the parameter is one of association or connection. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and schedules required for a building project. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In the Revit MEP model. If the length of the elevation is changed. You learn the terminology. hence. In this case. the hierarchy of elements. As you work in drawing and schedule views. drawing sheets. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and phases when you need it. and plans. schedules. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the operation of the software is parametric. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. every drawing sheet. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the floor or roof remains connected.

Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. walls and ceilings are hosts. ducts. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. boilers. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and electrical panels. For example. Examples include detail lines. boilers. and 2D detail components. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. sinks. tags. and reference planes are datum elements. For example. tags. For example. Datum elements help to define project context. and keynotes are annotation elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. dimensions. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. filled regions. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. sprinklers. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. sprinklers. They display in relevant views of the design. sinks. levels. and electrical panels. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. dimensions. ducts. grids. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. They help to describe or document the design. When you change something.

programming is not required. section views. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. schedules. such as roofs. you do nothing to establish these relationships. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. views of the project. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. or bottom of foundation. By using a single project file. elevation views. The project file contains all information for the building design. and drawings of the design. In Revit MEP. In other cases. This information includes components used to design the model. For example. from geometry to construction data. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . you can explicitly control them. However. Project: In Revit MEP. for example. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. floors. and types. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. and so forth). categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Often. you must be in a section or elevation view. If you can draw. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. North . first floor. To place levels. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. top of wall. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Most often. families. and ceilings.

You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. However. You can also display several project views at one time. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). A type can also be a style. With a few clicks. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. identical use. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. and wires. Then experiment with them. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Type: Each family can have several types. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). pipes. System families can be transferred between projects.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Unlike system and standard component families. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. each in-place family contains only a single type. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. For example. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. hiding. or layer the views to see only the one on top. showing. System families include ducts. such as a A0 title block. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. For example. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. A type can be a specific size of a family. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. and similar graphical representation.

click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To return the panel to the ribbon. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs.

Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. select the tool first. data and systems. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. and CAD files. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. When working on the Modify tab..Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for running analysis on the current design. then select what you want to modify. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. project and system parameters. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and settings. tools used for editing existing elements. architect-specific tools.. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and for switching views.

Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. To keep a panel expanded. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 .Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. provides access to common tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). By default. closes the application menu (double-click). provides requested information. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. displays frequently used tools. when adding duct. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. For example.

. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. select a template and create a new drawing. such as Export and Publish. (Open) save the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. click. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Export) On the application menu. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Save As) export the current drawing.. select a file to open.

family. (Licensing) close the file. annotation. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Publish) print the current drawing. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. Camera.. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . or template file. To enable or disable a tool item.. or template file.On the application menu. publish the current project. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. provides views including Default 3D. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. click. and Walkthrough. saves a current project. (Print) access product and license information.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. but is not enabled by default. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. family.. to. annotation.

Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Clear the Status Bar check mark. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. In addition. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. When you are highlighting an element or component. When you are using a command. check the Status Bar. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Modify. This displays the command history in a list. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. displaying the same information. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next.To undo or redo a series of operations. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. when you switch to another editing mode. To hide the Status Bar. workshared components. Group. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. However. or the Family Editor. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Starting with the most recent command. Clipboard. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. To show the Status Bar again. repeat the command. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures).

for example. When you place an element in a drawing. click (Modify). On the Quick Access toolbar. select one or more elements of the same category. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add.To cancel or exit the current command. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Place a Wall. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. To change existing elements to a different type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area.

you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. There are several ways to access zoom options. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 1 Click ➤ Open. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. click Training Files.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. In the following steps. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.rvt. For example. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you are familiar with these tasks. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view.

NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 9 To display SteeringWheels.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. 6 Click in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. on the Navigation bar. click . and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. When you release the mouse button. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. If you do not have a wheel mouse. To modify or add snap increments. the view zooms in on the selected area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). Modifying the View | 19 . NOTE As you zoom in and out. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. In the drawing area. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.

and click tin the Options dialog.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. press ESC. As you move the mouse. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 14 To exit the wheel. moving the wheel to the desired location. For more information about SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. ➤ Options. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. click the SteeringWheels tab. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Click and drag to orbit the design. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.

zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. called drag controls. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . After you are familiar with these tasks. referred to as shape handles. 2 Enter ZR. bottoms. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Similar controls. and select the duct. These are the drag controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view.HVAC Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. as shown. Small blue dots. display along the ends. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.Design. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. and open Level 2 . Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.

you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. on the Standard toolbar. In this example. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. or press CTRL+Z. 6 On the Undo menu. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). All changes you make to a project are tracked. select the first item in the list. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. click the Undo command. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Move.

Some commands. as shown. 10 Move the cursor to the right. The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. In this case. click to specify the starting position. for example. such as Move and Copy. 11 With the duct already selected. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . you want to move the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. After selecting the element to move. and drag it to the left as shown.

Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Press ESC twice. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Enter VG. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Click OK.Return.End a command Some commands. 13 To end a command. such as the Modify Ducts command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.Supply. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. For example. Select Mechanical .

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

system families. and geometry from the starting template. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Finally. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. such as coordination review and interference checking. 7 In the Project Browser.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. use copy/monitor. New projects inherit all the families. 5 In the New Project dialog. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates.rte template. and modify system settings. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. and loadable families. you learn how to start a project from a template. click Training files. under Create new. the default building levels and standard views. under Template file. link files. such as ducts and pipes. In that case. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. settings. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 27 . such as the default project units and settings. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. You can either select a template from the template library. You can choose from several templates. 6 Click OK. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. select Project. create and manage views. and open Metric ➤ Templates. and open North. and click Open. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template.

18 In the Project Parameters dialog. under Energy Analysis. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. click (Browse). review the construction materials listed. click Browse. For example. (Browse). 9 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. you can select it now. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. NH. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. for City. ■ For Building Construction.8 In the drawing area. select Manchester. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Location. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. select Level 1. In the Choose Template dialog. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. select School or University. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. for Energy Data. ■ ■ Under Create new. select Project template. Click OK twice. 10 Using the same method. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. Click OK. create another new project using the Construction template. click Edit. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify.rte template and click Open. navigate to Metric Templates. If you want to use a template other than the default. Click Cancel. When you select the material. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. and select the Systems-Default_Metric.

After standard settings have been established for an organization.00 mm. for 90. under Duct Settings.rfa and click Open. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. power distribution systems. 110. 27 Click OK. plumbing. 26 In the right pane. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. for 90. piping.00 mm. and 310.00 mm. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.00 mm. click Sizes. and demand factors for electrical systems.00 mm.00 mm. click Round. wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Holding CTRL. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. click Wiring. 33 Click OK. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. 110. click Rectangular. 290. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 25 In the left pane. select Views. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.00 mm.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 140. For Categories.00 mm. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage.000 mm. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. and 140. under Pipe Settings. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 24 In the right pane. 260.00 mm. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. for 20.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. 22 In the right pane. Click OK twice. 23 In the left pane. select Identity Data. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. and fire protection systems. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.

under Create new. Select Ascending Click OK twice. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. For Then by. In addition. 5 Click OK. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project.Origin to Origin. select Family and Type. 4 In the New Project dialog. and groups that are contained in a project. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. select Project.rvt. For Then by. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Linking Projects In this exercise. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Sub-Discipline. select Auto . Notice that the file is saved as a template. under Template file. click Training. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Click Open. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Sort by. select View Name. 38 Close the file. families. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. select Associated Level. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. From the Positioning list. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. sheets. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. To enable this coordination.

reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. select the linked architectural model. Linking Projects | 31 . 8 If necessary. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 12 Click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. under Constraints.Mech. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . select Room Bounding. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.

25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. click Plan View types. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level.Floor. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 19 On the left side of the view. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 17 On the Options Bar. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click the level line for 03.

35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. If you modify a monitored element. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. and the level 4. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. 27 In the drawing area. and that the copied elements are monitored.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. 34 On the Basics tab. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. and click to select the linked model. click Custom. a warning message displays. 29 In the drawing area. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. click By Host View. highlight the linked model. select Custom. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. warnings notify you of any violations. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. appears above the copied elements. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Linking Projects | 33 . Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. for the link file. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. level 3. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. After copying. indicating that a relationship is established. indicating that an element has changed.

click Custom. click Edit. for the link file. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 36 Click OK. and Topography. deselect Levels. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. 2 In the New View Template dialog. Under Visibility. click Custom. enter Mechanical View and click OK. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. under View Properties. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Site. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. 5 On the Basics tab. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . 3 In the View templates dialog. Click OK. Planting. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Roads. Click OK. for Name. select Custom.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. deselect Parking.

notification preferences. under Template file. select Mechanical and click OK. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. Notice that the drawing area is black. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 7 Click OK. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. 3 Under Colors. click Training Files. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. they are not saved to project files or template files. These settings control the graphics. click Browse. and click OK.rte. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. 2 In the Options dialog.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and your username when using worksharing. 5 In the New Project dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. journal cleanup options. selection default options. 9 In the Options dialog. Modifying System Settings | 35 . click the Graphics tab. select Invert background color. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 8 Click ➤ Options. click the Graphics tab. under View Templates.

Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 14 Click OK. 13 Under Notifications. the elements causing the error display using this color. 19 Press ESC to end the command. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 18 Select the wall. and family libraries. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. and click OK. select One hour. When an error occurs. However. 11 In the Color dialog. select yellow. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. 2 In the Options dialog.10 Under Colors. select None. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 21 Close the file without saving it. 12 Click the General tab. For Tooltip assistance. including your default project template. 17 Press ESC to end the command. click the value for Selection color. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . family template files. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. click the File Locations tab. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. you specify default file locations. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval.

Save. In the following illustration. and you can create new libraries. click Browse. you can start a new project with that template. saving. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. However. click Browse. ➤ New ➤ Project. Load. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. and Import dialogs. click Places. note the list of library names. TIP To view a template. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 10 In the Places dialog. or loading a Revit MEP file. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. When you are opening. You can modify the existing library names and path. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. and click Open. Specifying File Locations | 37 . 5 Under Default path for user files. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. centralized. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. click Browse. select the folder to save your files to by default. Click and click Browse to select a template. 7 In the Options dialog. under Default path for family template files. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. such as in a large. 4 Click Cancel. 8 Click Cancel.3 Under Default template file. This path is set automatically during the installation process. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open.

18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select it as the library path. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. or families. and click OK twice. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Save. click (Add Value). and click (Browse). Load. click the My Library icon. and click Open. and change the name to My Library. and Import dialogs. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open.11 In the Places dialog. templates. click My Library. ➤ Open. 15 Under Library Name.

Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 19 Click Cancel. 5 In the text editor. specify the new location here. click OK. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 21 On the File Locations tab. custom color files. 14 Click in the drawing area. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 27 Click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 22 Select My Library. click Places. view the current path. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. If you work in a large office. If you want to relocate this path. and decal image files. click Edit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 3 Under Settings. 20 Click ➤ Options. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. click Edit. This path is determined during installation. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. click the Spelling tab. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 9 In the text editor. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. select Ignore words in uppercase. 2 In the Options dialog. such as bump maps. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 11 In the Options dialog. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths.

22 In the text editor.rte. click Restore Defaults. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click OK. click Browse. In this exercise. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . under Template file. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click OK. 19 In the Options dialog. and enter 500 . 4 In the New Project dialog. 20 Under Settings. work with snapping turned off. delete sheetmtl-CU. under Dimension Snaps. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Close. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. you modify snap settings. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 23 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can turn snap settings on and off. As you zoom in and out within a view. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Edit.. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 24 In the Options dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. you modify snap increments. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click the Spelling tab. click Training Files. 18 Click ➤ Options. click File menu ➤ Save. 25 Close the file without saving it.

and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action.7 Under Object Snaps. snapping reverts to the system default settings. For example. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. use the wheel button on your mouse. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. If it does not. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and move the cursor to the right. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. click OK. This is the increment that you added previously. TIP To zoom while sketching. While sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. zoom out until it does so. such as ZO to zoom out. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . deselect Chain. 10 On the Options Bar. If you do not have a wheel button. enter SM. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall.

24 Under Dimension Snaps. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Notice that snapping is once again active. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. with or without saving it. Do not set the wall end point. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and delete the value 500 . click in the Length dimension snap increments box.. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the midpoint.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. it will snap to the endpoints. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and the wall edges. 19 Enter SM. 22 Move the cursor downward. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 26 Close the file. 25 Click OK. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and specify the wall endpoint. and move the cursor to the right. If you move the cursor along the wall.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

If the tutorial training files are not present. you can choose to save your work. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. 45 . and then you create a plenum level. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you first plan the system. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. After finishing each exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. In this exercise. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you first configure the linked architectural model. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. methodology. This system consists of a cooling tower. you will understand the process. At the end of the tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In this lesson. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. As you create the mechanical system. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. go to http://www. However. After applying a color scheme to the zones. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.autodesk. duct system and a hydronic piping system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. By following the recommended workflow. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. water source heat pump (WSHP).

Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). you add a level for plenums. and after the linked model highlights. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Constraints. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. In this section. and click OK. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 6 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. ceilings. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. click Training Files. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection.Space Plan is highlighted. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. roof.MEP. select Room Bounding.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. not in the MEP training file. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Next. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click to select it. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. NOTE When working with a linked file. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and double-click West .

enter 2600mm. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and in the Plan View Types dialog. Click Plan View Types. 16 Press Esc. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and enter Level 2 Plenum. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 9 On the Draw panel. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and click Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. The new level is placed. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. For Offset. and click OK. Preparing Spaces | 47 .7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template).

you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. select Design. For View Classification. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. for Level. click Edit. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. you place spaces in areas of the building model. Under Extents. for View Range. In this exercise. you can choose to save your work. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. and for Offset. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. for Default View Template. for Top. In this exercise. select Plenum Plan. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. for View Scale. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. 20 In the Project Browser. Under Identity Data. and then place spaces in various types of areas. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. ■ Click OK twice. enter 0. In the next exercise. However. NOTE After finishing each exercise. For Sub-Discipline. select MEP . 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . right-click Level 2 Plenum. For Cut plane.Plenum. enter an Offset of 300mm. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. and click Apply Default View Template. select Level Above (Level 3). This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.

Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Offset. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Upper Limit. select New. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For (Tag Location). Placing Spaces | 49 . select Horizontal. select Level 2 Plenum. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 0. For Space. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. and ceilings). 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. indicating that it’s the active view. walls.

7 Click to place the space. ensuring coordination between the files. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Name. enter 219. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. Click OK. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 9 Select the space. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Number. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter Library. 14 In the drawing area.

19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Placing Spaces | 51 . 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. For Offset. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. For Upper Limit. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. select Level 3. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. enter 0. 21 Using the method learned previously. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and then click Modify.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 23 Click OK. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. under Energy Analysis.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

enter 0. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. for Upper Limit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then press Esc. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and for Offset. select Level 3.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted.

notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. In the schedule. and select Corridor. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.7 In the Project Browser. 10 Click in the number column. click in the name column. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 In the schedule. which was numbered 219Q. and scroll to the newly placed space. and change the space number to 216A. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 11 Close the schedule view. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 15 Press Esc twice. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. as shown. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view.

and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The new space is numbered correctly (216B). you place a space in a chase. 18 Close the file with or without saving it.16 Using the method learned previously.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files.rvt. If necessary. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.

7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. right-click. In the plan view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. select Level 3. 10 In the plan view. expand Spaces. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 12 Click in the section view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. for Upper Limit. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. For Offset. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Element Properties. and then click OK. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. On the Options Bar. select Interior and Reference. for Upper Limit.4 Press Esc. click in the chase area to place the space. 6 Enter VG. select Roof Level. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. select the space.

select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume.Space Plan. enter 1200. ceilings.■ For Limit Offset. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. and maximize the view. For Number. and click OK. 15 Press Esc. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. enter Chase. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 17 Type ZF. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . Bounding elements (such as walls. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. floors. under Loaded Tags. Under Identity Data. for Name. enter 225PC. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. All spaces in the view are tagged.

3 Right-click in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. To display space reference lines. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. After a space is placed in an area. it is automatically added to the Default zone. under Spaces. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Zoning is highlighted. click Training Files. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. which removes the space from the Default zone. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. click View ➤ Zones. indicating that it’s the active view. click Reference. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area.rvt. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the next exercises. In this exercise.20 Close the file with or without saving it.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. double-click 121 Cafeteria. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and click OK. the Edit Zone tab displays. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. under Spaces. Next. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. and a new zone is created. To display space reference lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The Zone tool is active. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. click Training Files.rvt. ) or 5 In the System Browser. indicating that the space is occupiable. you assign spaces to a zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Occupiable. click Reference. you assign spaces to zones in the building. As you do this. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . under Energy Analysis. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify the zones in the System Browser.

and click Finish Editing Zone. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). You work with a single zone until you click Finish. 5 With the drawing area active. you need to activate the zone visibility. Instruction. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Instruction 221. you can add or remove a space from the zone. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and modify the zone properties. Click OK. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select HVAC Zones. and Electrical 220 spaces. Using the Edit Zone tab. 4 In the drawing area. To view the zone in the drawing area. Expand HVAC Zones. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. select Computer Lab 222. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. type VG. In the System Browser.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information.

You activated zone visibility in the views. 9 In the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Area B. 5 Click in the Level 1 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .Zoning. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. click Training Files. for Name. and click OK. expand 2 . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 11 Close the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.rvt. In this exercise.Zoning is highlighted. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. enter 2 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Spaces. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. indicating that it’s the active view. click Reference.TIP After you finish editing the zone. under Identity Data. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.West . To display space reference lines. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.Zoning view to activate it. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.West . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. click Finish Editing Zone. and verify the zone in the System Browser.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.

10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Zoning view.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. zoom out. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 9 With the Add Space tool active.Zoning floor plan. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. Select Attached End. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 8 In the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. click in the Level 2 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

click the corner where the Top. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you verify the building. and select 109 Lounge. on the ViewCube. double-click Level 1 . Front. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.rvt. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.Zoning view. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. In this exercise.Zoning to make it the active view. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C.East. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . verify that Wireframe is selected. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. space. for Name Value. double-click the zone tag. and zone information. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . enter Lounge . Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.

■ Click (Highlight). you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ ■ On the Details tab. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Using the Highlight tool. you isolate the space. With 109 Lounge selected. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. select 1_South_Area C. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate). Next.

click .33 °C : 12. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. verify that <Building> is selected. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. Below the list of spaces and zones. and click OK. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. outdoor air per area.22 °C : N/A is specified. select Lounge/Recreation. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For Cooling Information. For Construction Type. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Below the list of spaces and zones.11 °C : 32. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. the zone information displays for the selected zone. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. For People. click (Shading). verify that <Building> is selected. This indicates the heating set point. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. select 109 Lounge. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. verify that 21. This indicates the outdoor air per person. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and dehumidification set point. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . click . and then click OK. Next. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that 23. This indicates the cooling set point. cooling air temperature. heating air temperature. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. the space information displays for the selected space. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. and then click OK. click . For Heating Information. and in the People dialog. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. Next. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). ■ ■ ■ Next. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. For Electrical Loads. and humidification set point. scroll down in the left pane.22 °C : N/A is specified. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and air changes per hour.

select Level 3. and other room-bounding components. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. For Offset. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. roofs. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. floors. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. 15 In the Project Browser. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 12 Using the methods learned previously. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. enter 0.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. click Cancel. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. open MEP . highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume.

for Number. you verified building. Click OK. and verify that the space has replaced the void. and select space Plenum 212P. Because this is an unoccupied space. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. In this exercise. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. select Plenum. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. For Name. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. space. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 212P. select Plenum. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and zone information. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Under Energy Analysis. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Under Energy Analysis.

for Energy Data. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . click Edit. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Space Plan. On the Place tab. For Building Construction. If. verify that New Construction is selected. For Postal Code. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Ground Plane. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. is selected. for Building Service. In order to select a space. click in the Value field. this option adjusts the times automatically. click Training Files. select School or University. enter 03101. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. under Energy Analysis. 8 In the drawing area. and click OK. select space Library 219. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. you need to select this option. verify that 300 is specified. For Location. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. for City. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Project Phase. On the Weather tab. verify that Level 1 is selected. under Volume Computations. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Manchester. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. double-click Level 2 . you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and click OK. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. Click OK twice. right-click. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Export Complexity. NH. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.

and click OK. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. Next. click Edit. enter 45 W. for Values.Audio Visual. a cooling load. select Actual.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. Select the space associated with the warning. and enter 15 sq. NH. For People. for Values. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. for Values. For Building Construction. m. verify that Occupiable is selected. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Under Heat Gain (per Person). click in the Value column. For Condition Type. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. select Heated and cooled. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Location. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . Revit MEP stores this information as project information. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Specified. For Latent. verify that <Building> is specified. For Sensible. is specified. for Values. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. and then click . both. select Actual. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. Click OK. click Edit. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Click OK twice. verify that School or University is selected. Under Power. select Specified. For Space Type. select Library . it should be corrected before you calculate loads. For Building Service. 12 Click the Details tab. or neither. and click to learn the cause for the warning. enter 60 W. Select Area per person. verify that Manchester. You have verified the building information.

21 Click OK.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and a loads report displays. There should be no warnings displayed. under Energy Analysis. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. select 219 Library.11°C. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. You should correct the space error in the building model. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. or zone information. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. and can be modified here. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. space. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building.Space Plan. 16 After you review the loads report. and zone information for the building model. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. click Information). You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . space. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. weather. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select 219 Library. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. 15 Review the loads report for project. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. In this exercise. 19 In the drawing area. and click OK. 17 In the loads report. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. click Calculate. and under Heating Information. or make any changes to the model.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the drawing area. 5 Zoom in to the legend. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. in relatively small increments. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .rvt. click to the right of the building to place the legend. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. select HVAC Zones. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. For Color Scheme. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. Click OK. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.

Expanded Ranges. and click OK. The new scheme displays in the view. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. select Cooling Load . select the color scheme legend. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Schemes. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.

rvt. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. click Training Files. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In the next exercise. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . 11 Using the method learned previously.

and click OK.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter Space Airflow Schedule. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.Space Fill is the active view. Select Formula. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Select Schedule building components. ■ Click Calculated Value. For Formula. In the Calculated Value dialog. For Discipline. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Click OK. For Name. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select Air Flow. click (Browse). If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Available fields. select Spaces. Click OK. and then click . more category options are available. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the Fields dialog. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. for Select available fields from. select Spaces. enter . verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Phase. For Type. select HVAC. In the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. enter Airflow Delta. for Formula. select New Construction.

Header. Select Ascending. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . For Fields. verify that Show is highlighted. select Number. right-click to access schedule properties. Under Conditions to Use. and click OK. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Background Color. ■ The schedule displays. In the Color dialog. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select Not Between. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. For Value. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. click the color swatch. select red. Click OK twice. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and Blank line. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. For Then by. a view opens that contains the selected space. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. select Level. select Airflow Delta. select Level. and then click Conditional Format. and then select Hidden field.

and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In later exercises. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the next lesson. In this exercise. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.

After system creation. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. and work with the airflow schedule. you will create supply air systems. After completing the air systems lesson. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you modify air terminal parameters. In this lesson. Then. 79 . learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. As you place the air terminals.

When you highlight a space using the cursor. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 3 In the ceiling view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and scroll to space 223. the space crossing lines display. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 9 On the Placement panel. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 .8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and press Enter. select the diffuser. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. enter 215 L/s. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. 17 Move the cursor down. If the host element is modified or moved. 15 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc to end the command. for Flow. the hosted elements are updated as well. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. click Place on Face. type 3600. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and select M_Supply Diffuser . 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Also. The schedule updates with the new flow data. verify that Constrain is cleared. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.

Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. click Yes.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. Next. select one of the diffusers. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 24 In the Open dialog. 22 In the drawing area. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. As you place the return diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog.rfa. and click Open. 28 On the Placement tab. as shown. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. click Place on Face. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s.

33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select Strong Reference. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. click Yes. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. for Reference. select one of the return diffusers. under Other.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click to select the lines. Level. as shown. 32 In the Project Browser. 31 In the alert dialog.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. select the vertical grid line as shown. align the other return diffuser. and then press Esc twice. as shown. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 43 Using the same method. 40 In the drawing area. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.

for Flow. and press Enter. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. select both return diffusers. As you place the air terminals. clear LeftArrow. under Mechanical. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.44 While pressing Ctrl. enter 310 L/s. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Using the same method. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . and on the Options Bar. right-click. and click Element Properties. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. and click OK. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

10 In the drawing area. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .200 Neck. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand HVAC . at the lower left corner of the building. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . and double-click Level 1 . 2 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.rvt. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. 8 In the Type Selector. click 1 : 100. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. select M_Supply Diffuser . 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. click Training Files. the space crossing lines display.HVAC Plan . 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile.Design to make it the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Airflow. By copying the diffuser. 15 Press Esc. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. As a result. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . 11 Select the diffuser. under Constraints. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Offset. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Also. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Click OK. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. for Flow. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. enter 170 L/s. Under Mechanical . If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. and then press Enter. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. type 6000. move the cursor down. enter 2400. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level.

18 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. and then press Esc.16 Using the same method. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

select 21. for Embedded Schedule. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Available Fields. Mark. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and then right-click in the schedule. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. for Sort by. Next. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and click View Properties. and press Enter. Type. 27 In the schedule. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . because you are modifying the digital database of building information. and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. under space 115. 26 Using the method learned previously. double-click System Type. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. it is a negative value. select Mark. enter 210 L/s. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. under Other. select Air Terminals. 25 Click OK 3 times. 29 Using the same method. For Category. for Flow. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. mark. click Edit. tile the windows. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. type.

Design. and maximize Level 1 . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. 31 In the drawing area. As you highlight the zone. as shown.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.HVAC Plan . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.

verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.3 times the heating load). 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. select M_WSHP . zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 33 Click OK.7-18 kW .43 W (approximately 1.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.High Efficiency . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. 36 In the drawing area.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.Horizontal .Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and under Energy Analysis. 35 In the Type Selector.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. click Training Files. After creating the logical connection. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. right-click the title. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In this exercise. However. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . As you add diffusers to systems. When you highlight a space. IMPORTANT In the System Browser.rvt. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. and click View ➤ Systems. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter . including energy analysis. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.HVAC Plan . the space crossing lines display. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You then create the logical connection between the system components. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 44 Zoom in to space 115. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. 6 Keep the System Browser open.Design is highlighted. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed.

and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 18 Click OK. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. review the Number of Elements. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . the number of elements is updated. 12 In the System Browser. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. the air terminals are the children. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Connect Into. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). and Flow value. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. System Name. 11 In the drawing area. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. On the Options Bar. 17 Using the method learned previously. and the system connects them. 15 Click Cancel.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout.

You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. for Mark. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.Rename the system Next. 22 Click OK. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. under Identity Data. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for System Name. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. which updates the name in the System Browser.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. click Training Files. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Click OK. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. under Mechanical. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. In this exercise. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection.

7 On the Options Bar. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . select Network. for Solution Type. For Flex Duct Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . For Offset. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.Round. When you highlight a space using the cursor. enter 3000. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. click Settings. and display solution 1. Select Branch.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In this case. For Offset. which provides various layout tools.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan. Also. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . enter 3000.Design is highlighted. the Network type provides several solutions. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. indicating that it’s the active view. A Generate Layout tab displays. 5 On the Options Bar. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. For Duct Type. the space crossing lines display. 4 In the drawing area. For Duct Type. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. select the upper left diffuser.

or offset elevations are incorrect. as shown. you’ll get an error in a later step. or manually modify the duct. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. 11 Click Finish Layout.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. enter 900. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Click OK. select a different layout solution. For example. as is the elbow itself. click Modify. Either relocate the system components. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers.

you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. thus it is not part of the system. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. select Duct Color Fill . Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. for Color Scheme. a disconnection exists. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. If the entire network does not highlight.Flow.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Using a flow-based color scheme. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. and click OK. The first time you press Tab. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. highlight a segment of the main duct. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. fittings. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. and click to select it. and equipment. Usually. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected.

Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. select the WSHP. select one of the diffusers in the system. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). under Mechanical . 20 In the drawing area. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. select By View. and press Enter. for Values Displayed. but not all values are used in this view. under Graphics. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and then click OK. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view.Airflow. and click OK. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. for Flow.

select the color scheme legend. select Friction. for Schemes. Select Only. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Select the upper segment of main duct. select Calculated Size Only. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. and then press Esc to clear the selection. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 26 Click OK. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Select Restrict Height. Click OK. for Branch Sizing. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area.Velocity. and enter . If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.65 Pa/m. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Under Constraints. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. highlight a segment of the duct. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and select 400. select Duct Color Fill .21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and drag it to the right. click Cancel. and then click to select it. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.

33 Move the cursor over the system components. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Using this tool.The ductwork and fittings are updated. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. static pressure. pressure. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and pressure loss. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Use the information that displays (flow.

remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct.NOTE As you inspect a system. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise.rvt. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. also known as the critical path. 35 Click Finish. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.

and click Draw Duct. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and select the WSHP.Design is highlighted. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.HVAC Plan . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.3D MEP. Front.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select the top right diffuser. and click Draw Duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 15 On the ViewCube. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. for Offset. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. right-click the connector grip. 14 In the Project Browser. click the corner where the Top. enter 3000. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 11 On the Options Bar. double-click MEP . NOTE When drawing duct.

Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 19 In the drawing area. it is considered a closed loop. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork is automatically created. in space 115.

You can ignore the warning. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.22 Using the same method. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc.

29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 30 Press Esc twice. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and then click Modify.

37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow. 40 Using the same method. clear Restrict Height. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and click to select it. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select a segment of the main duct. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. and then click OK. under Mechanical . such as a plenum.Airflow. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and click OK. under Constraints. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area.

108 .

you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. on level 3 of the building model. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Create return and supply piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. In this lesson. you place mechanical equipment. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 109 . Then. including 2 base mounted pumps. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Automatically and manually lay out piping.

Design is highlighted. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Horizontal High Efficiency . in corridor 328. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Left Return . and select M_WSHP . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan .7-18kW . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 10 Select the WSHP. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 8 Click the corridor wall face. verify that Wall faces is selected. click the dimension.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. and enter 600. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. and click to place the dimension. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP.

) 14 Click Modify. and in the Type Selector. verify that the WSHP is still selected. as shown. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the 2 WSHPs.

enter 2750. for Water Flow. 21 Click Modify. enter 0.75 L/s. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. for Offset. Under Mechanical. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Click OK. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. as shown. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

22 Close the file with or without saving it. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. but without a corresponding system. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Create the logical connection between the system components. including flow and pressure. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. analyses cannot be performed. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. You can create pipes to connect system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Unlike logical connections (systems). Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you create the return and supply piping systems. Create pipes to physically connect the system components.

Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations.rvt. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler.HVAC Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Mech 330).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Assigning a system component to an existing system. right-click the Systems column heading. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Piping System | 115 . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. and click View ➤ Piping. Therefore. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. 5 In the System Browser. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the System Browser. click Training Files. select the 2 WSHPs. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.Design is highlighted. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. while pressing Ctrl. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. where it is easier to review the information. This display indicates that the system is selected. As you assign equipment to systems. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.

17 On the Options Bar. select the boiler.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Finish Editing System. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and the Edit System tool is not active.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for System Name. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. You have created the hydronic return system. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 In the drawing area. for System Name. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Notice that on the Options Bar.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. double-click Roof . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 25 Select the boiler. Creating a Piping System | 117 .18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. and select the cooling tower. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 26 Click Finish Editing System. In heating mode. and bypasses the cooling tower. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. under Design ➤ HVAC . IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and click OK. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 19 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 23 Close the roof plan view.Design. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. In cooling mode. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.

and click Expand All. enter 0. 29 Right-click CHWS. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. expand Piping. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. for Water Flow. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Column Settings. In the System Browser. and click OK. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser.8. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 32 In the System Browser. and click OK. including the flow rate and size of the component. expand the Hydronic Return system category. and click Properties. 28 Using the same method. indicating the logical connection. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. under Mechanical. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. you can view several parameters. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click Select.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser.

IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. the boiler. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). then the Select a System dialog displays.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. click Training Files. select Mechanical Equipment. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Mech 330). Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 5 In the Filter dialog. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. you can place the cursor over a system component.rvt. and click to select it.HVAC Plan . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). indicating that it’s the active view. click Check None. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When you draw a box to select components. A system preview displays in red. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.Design is highlighted. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). press Tab to highlight the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.

Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select CHWR. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. structural beams.9 In the Select a System dialog. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. duct. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. For Inset. or architectural components. It does not reference the architecture. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 10 Click OK. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. click Settings. enter 450. select Perimeter. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. 13 Click Cancel. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. verify that Solutions is selected. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 17 Optionally. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. With each Tab. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. to display the path with thinner lines. and press Tab 3 times.75 L/s. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. the flow for each WSHP is 0.16 Click Finish Layout. 19 In the drawing area. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.

24 Press Esc. notice that the Water Flow is 1. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. verify that the value for Flow is 1. and access its instance properties. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 23 Under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 Select the boiler.50 L/s.75 L/s). and click OK.50 L/s.

the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). On the Options Bar. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. click Edit System.Design. double-click Level 1 . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 27 On the System Tools panel. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . Logically. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. the Number of Elements is now 8. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.HVAC Plan . 28 In the Project Browser.

50 L/s. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. so the total flow of 6. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. you physically close the CHWR loop. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. 38 Using the same method. note that the value for Flow is 4.94 L/s. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. which propagates flow throughout the system.94 L/s. and click Cancel.44 L/s. 35 Using the drag control. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. access its instance properties.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. Next.

enter 450. 41 Click OK. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. and then click OK. select Perimeter 1 of 5.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. 40 In the Select a System dialog. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. For Slope. select CHWS. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. For Inset.00%. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Click Settings. select a WSHP. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. enter 0.

47 In the drawing area. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 46 Click Modify. In a later exercise. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 48 While pressing Ctrl.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. (Both sections are at the same elevation.

and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. 51 Click Finish Layout. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. Either relocate the system components. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 50 Using the same method. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). select a different layout solution. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or offset elevations are incorrect. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. To create the piping system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . or manually modify the pipe.

NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. as shown.Design is highlighted. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you work in the training file. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. double-click 3D Building. indicating that it’s the active view.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the return pipes are magenta.HVAC Plan .

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . as shown. 6 Press Delete.

and press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. Click to specify the reference point. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.

select the boiler. The connections are automatically created. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. select the return pipe riser. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . and click Draw Pipe. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and the lower one is secondary.11 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. 13 In the plan view. 12 In the 3D view. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.

16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. enter 600.In a plan view. ■ Move the cursor down. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. and press Enter. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. enter 381. and you select 1 connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.

Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 19 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 18 Press Esc twice. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. and the appropriate fittings are created. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and click OK. As you place piping runs that are close together. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew.

and click Draw Pipe. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. as shown. right-click the bottom connector. you select the tee fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click to draw the pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and select it. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump.

zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. for Offset.28 Press Esc. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector. 29 If necessary. and click to create the pipe. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the primary base mounted pump. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 1200.

33 Press Esc. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

35 Using the method learned previously. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee.

■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. enter 2850. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and click to create the pipe. for Offset. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. type 300.

Next.37 Click Modify. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You now have a closed loop system. you validate the flow through the system.

42 Click OK. When you create the pumps in parallel. the value is 0 L/s.44 L/s).50 or 50% of the Flow. as shown. and click Element Properties. right-click. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. view the properties for the secondary pump. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . The flow is being propagated through the piping. under Mechanical. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. and click Element Properties.44 L/s. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . for Cooling Water Flow. select the cooling tower. 43 Press Esc.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. notice that under Mechanical. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. Connect the cooling tower Next. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Cancel. 44 In the 3D view. under Mechanical. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. which is rounded up to 3. 46 Press Esc. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the plan view. right-click. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. and click OK. notice that Flow is 6. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Lower pipe (outlet).■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).

and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. select the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. 49 Press Esc. 50 In the 3D View. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . and close the dialog.44 L/s. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

rvt. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. click Training Files. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Valves In this exercise. When the valve is open.HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. the water bypasses the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. and is heated by the boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown.Design is highlighted.52 Close the file with or without saving it.

4 On the Options Bar. 8 Press Esc twice. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and select M_Ball Valve . Adding Valves | 145 . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.

146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. parallel to the previously placed valve.10 Press Esc. place another M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 12 Select M_Ball Valve .

and click Element Properties. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. validate that the Flow is 6. under Mechanical. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Valves | 147 . 19 Using the same method. and click OK.44 L/s. right-click.

Sizing Pipe In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. 22 Using the method you just learned. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. 20 Select the bypass valve. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Initially.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. validate that the Flow is 6. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). and select M_Ball Valve . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.rvt. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. click Training Files.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). and select M_Ball Valve .44 L/s. In heating mode.44 L/s. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Size.HVAC Plan . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.Design is highlighted. as shown. select Pipe Color Fill . Sizing Pipe | 149 . for Schemes.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Flow. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.

press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Either relocate the system components. 13 Press Esc. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. and for Velocity.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select Friction. and enter 220 Pa/m. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Click OK. select a different layout solution.5 m/s. or manually modify the pipe. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. and click to select the branch. Under Constraints. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. for Branch Sizing. enter 1. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Select And.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. and double-click 3D Building. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Inspecting the System | 151 . you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. click Training Files.14 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. pressure. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Inspecting the System In this exercise. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.rvt. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Using the System Inspector. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.Design ➤ 3D Views.

The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). flow. This information helps you modify the system design. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. as required. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. An inspection flag reports the section number. as shown. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. and pressure information including pressure loss.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly.

Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Warnings display. click Training Files.rvt. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.HVAC Plan . and click OK. In this exercise. select 32° C. 10 Click Finish.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. the Static Pressure is 41916.0 L/s. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.1 Pa. In the left pane of the Open dialog. inspect Section 6 again. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . you need to validate them. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .4 Pa.Note that the Flow is 1. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.Design. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. and double-click Level 3 . 9 Using the same method. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. for Fluid Temperature. and to size pipe.7. targeting those systems that need attention.

the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. right-click Hydronic Return. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. right-click the Systems titlebar. and click View. 10 Using the same methods. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.HVAC Plan . click Close. otherwise. 9 Right-click CHWS. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. In the System Browser. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. thus assigning the components to a system. 12 In the System Browser. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. and click Expand All. and confirm unassigned system components. If you place components without assigning them to a system. and for pipe sizing. and click Show to view all of the system components. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems.Design. and select Level 3 . 6 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). As you learned when placing components. expand the Unassigned folder. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. For example. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the pipe is associated with that system.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 4 In the System Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. After you assign components to a system. TIP If you have multiple views open. 7 In the System Browser.HVAC Plan . double-click Level 1 . 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design floor plan. After you have assigned all components to systems. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.

You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it.13 Right-click CHWR. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.

156 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 157 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

158 .

Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

rvt. select 90.04. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Select Correction Factor. and demand factors that are applied in the design. For Factor. wiring. ■ ■ For Material. select Copper. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. expand Wiring .Wire Sizes.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. enter 70. distribution systems. enter THHN. click (Open). enter 1. For Temperature. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . For Material. ■ Click New Correction Factor. You also add a wiring type. As you place components and create circuits. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. select Wiring Types. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. speeding up the design phase. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. select Copper. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Click OK.

The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. For Value. select 3. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. For Neutral Multiplier. select 240. enter 220. Select Neutral Required. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. select 120.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. select Power. enter 250. enter 240. select Hot Conductor Size. select Steel. enter 50. select Single. For Conduit Type. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click Split. For L-L Voltage. For Wires. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. select 75. For L-G Voltage. select Distribution Systems. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Demand Factors. For Phase. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. By specifying a range. For Maximum. Under More Than. select Voltage Definitions. For Neutral Size. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . enter 1. enter 2000.0. For Minimum. select 10000 VA. For Max Size. For Insulation. enter 120/240. select THHN. enter 240.

under the Electrical . and conference rooms. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. click Add. For Group Parameter Under. select Spaces. restrooms. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise.Lighting Plan. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. click Training Files. select Illuminance. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. and double-click Level 2 . Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Click OK twice. For Type of Parameter. Later in the tutorial. because the key is linked to your new project parameter.Lighting group in the space element properties. 5 In the drawing area. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Required Lighting Level. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. In this case the key style is the type of space and. select Electrical. select Electrical . Under Categories.Lighting. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Verify that Instance is selected. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. click (Open). its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. such as offices. For Discipline.

14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. enter Space Lighting Requirements. under Electrical . 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . Click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Lighting. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 485. enter Lighting Levels. enter Open Office. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and for Key Name. double-click Required Lighting Level. Select Schedule Keys. For Name. select Spaces. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. under Available Fields. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. Click OK. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . which is mapped to project units. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. Select Blank Line. click Edit. 21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. for Sorting/Grouping. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 22 Using the same method. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. change the sort order back to the default setting. select Required Lighting Level.Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. Notice that as you enter the data. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. click (Open). 27 Click OK. the value input applies only to the selected space. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. In this exercise. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. select Instruction-Standard. Later in this exercise. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. under Identity Data. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. that Required Lighting Level is blank. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Lighting Levels.

00. For example. select Required Lighting Level. select Spaces. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. enter 900. enter Required Lighting and click OK. click (Add Value) again.00 lx. for Category. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 00 lx still selected. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. for Title. enter 200. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. and click (Add Value) five times. click (Duplicate). then the new value will be 400 lx. click Training Files. Under Schemes. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition.00 lx. Select the scheme for At Least 20. enter 800. and press Enter. and press ENTER. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. Select the scheme for 450. For Color. and click OK to dismiss the alert message.00 lx. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. and click (Add Value). enter Required Lighting Levels. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. verify the By Range is selected. and in the At Least column. for Name.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. ■ Click OK. Select the scheme for 500 lx. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200.00.rvt. and press ENTER.

double-click Number. select Required Lighting. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. enter Lighting Delta. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Level. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. For Name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting .Lighting CF. select Illuminance. and Required Lighting Level. and double-click Level 2 . select Spaces. select Electrical. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Color Scheme. For Type. select Spaces. 8 In the drawing area. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. for Available Fields. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. For Discipline. Average Estimated Illumination. 13 Click Calculated Value. Name. Click OK.

for Test. select Not Between. select Required Lighting Level. select Red. Click OK. Select Header. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Click Conditional Format. click Browse. Click Background Color. Click OK twice. and click Browse. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. under Condition. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog.■ For Formula. On the Formatting tab. for Custom Colors. select Lighting Delta. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . type a hyphen. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Click OK three times. For Value. Select Blank Line. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. for Sort by. select Level. select Average Estimated Illumination. for Fields. for Formula. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. press the spacebar. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .

170 .

you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. as you place lighting fixtures. power circuits. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. 171 . First. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create a panel schedule. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Use the System Browser to check your design.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Then.

3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 7 In the Project Browser.rvt. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. for the Spaces Category. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Click OK. select Orange. select the color legend. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the Color dialog. select Average Estimated Illumination. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 8 In the Project Browser. select the color for Less Than 200 lx.Lighting Ceiling plan. 2 In the drawing area. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. Under Scheme Definition. By using orange as the color for this range. You can create additional color schemes.Lighting CF view is open. click Training Files. for Basic Colors. click (Open). expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.

11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. zoom to space Library 219. which is the lowest value in the specified range. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 13 Click the Level 2 . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. the fixtures will move accordingly. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.5 fc range. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.277V. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 18 Click to place the fixture. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.the +/. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected.5 fc range is satisfied. 20 Select the lighting fixture. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

for Apparent Load. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. ■ Under Electrical Loads.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. In the Name dialog. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .00 VA. enter 162. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. for Name enter and click OK. scroll to view space space Library 219. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type.

and Receptacles | 183 . select Xenon and click OK. In the Select File dialog. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. enter . the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. 9 In space Library 219. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click Training Files. Placing Switches. for Lamp. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. enter F15. Under Photometrics. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. for Type Mark. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Placing Switches. select 463T5_S. ■ Click Apply. ■ Click OK twice.85.00 lm. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. click the value for Initial Color. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Under Photometrics. for Color Preset. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. junction boxes. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Junction Boxes. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. click the value for Light Loss Factor. select Luminous Flux. Junction Boxes. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. click the value for Initial Intensity. Under Electrical.93. select the top center fixture. specify 15000.ies and click Open. select T5 [HO]. click (Open). Under Photometrics. you add switches. Click OK. enter . ■ Under Photometrics. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise.rvt. and receptacles to your design.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.277V. 7 Click to place the switch. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

12 In the Load Family dialog.rfa and click Open.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 185 . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. Select M_Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. The element type M_Junction Boxes .NoLoad.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.

Click Edit Type. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Offset. for Mark. In the Type Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 21 In the drawing area. NOTE When entering values. enter JB-1NL.14 Press ESC to end the command. Under Electrical. enter 2750. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . for Level 2 . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 Select the junction box. Click OK twice. zoom to space Library 219. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. note the Number of Poles is 1.

right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. 26 In the System Browser. and Number of Elements. Space Number. Placing Switches. Select Size. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Expand Electrical. Select Load. and Voltage. Click OK. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Receptacles | 187 . This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Expand General. 23 In the System Browser. Distribution System. NOTE If necessary. right-click and click Column Settings. 24 For any column. Junction Boxes. Space Name.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None.

35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Close the System Browser. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.

Junction Boxes. move the cursor along the wall. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Placing Switches. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. select Copy and Multiple. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 .

43 Press ESC to end the command.42 Move the cursor down. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.

rvt.equipment. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Adding wiring to a project is optional. click Training Files. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . 2 In the drawing area. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. zoom to the space Electrical 220. and work toward the higher voltage.208V MCB . click (Open). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.Surface: 100A. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

enter 20. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select 480/277 Wye. for Max. 14 Select the panelboard. enter LP-2B. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 8 Select the panelboard. enter 20. For Panel Name. Click OK. 7 Press ESC to end the command. for Distribution System. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 15 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . select 120/208 Wye. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Max.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. #1 Pole Breakers.480V MCB . #1 Pole Breakers.Loads. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.Loads. for Distribution System. For Panel Name. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter PP-2B. 9 On the Options Bar.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 23 In the Filter dialog. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Instruction 221. which is the logical connection between the elements. and for Category. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 20 In the drawing area.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. click Check None. Click OK. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 28 Press ESC to end the command.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 38 Press ESC to end the command.35 Select the left three-way switch.

rvt. and for Category.Loads. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. for Hot Conductors. except without wire. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. click (Open). add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. select Wires. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Click OK. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 2. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 42 In the Filter dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. click Check None. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and create permanent wiring.39 Using the same method. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.

right-click on the Systems heading. expand Power. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Voltage. and then expand circuit 1.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Expand Electrical. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 13 In the System Browser. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Click OK. Distribution System. Rating. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and verify that Load. and Voltage Drop are selected. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B.

Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. under Electrical. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 30 Close the System Browser. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 22 With the junction box still selected. Click Tags. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. change the Voltage to 277V. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.

33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Break. click below the first one to place it. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Click Yes. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. enter FR4. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. under Identity Data. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 47 In the drawing area. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . notice the label parameters and click Cancel. For Circuit Number. for Type Mark. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit Type. Click OK. 40 Click OK twice.

Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Next you create a switch system.rfa. 52 In the Save As dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tags. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. for File Name. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 62 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. and for Category. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. click Training Files. Click Save. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and click Apply. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click OK. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click OK.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 54 Select all of the tags. click Check None. click (Open). enter a comma. 57 In the Filter dialog. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard.

11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 2 In the drawing area. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. under Electrical Lighting. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. for Switch ID. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. enter a. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Click OK.

Lighting. Click OK. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. under Electrical . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. enter b. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

lighting. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. and for Category. Click OK. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. Click OK. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Circuits are used for power.Loads. click Check None. select the PP-2B panel. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and data systems. select Electrical Fixtures. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Creating Power Loads | 207 . click Training Files. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. 4 In the Filter dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Hot Conductors. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). and click Element Properties. enter 2. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click (Open). 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 2 In the drawing area. under Electrical .26 Close the file with or without saving it. 7 In space Electrical 220. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.

navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.rfa. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select Wiring. and click Open. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.13 Select the wire again. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click to select the circuit. and in the drawing area. and in the right pane. 19 Click OK. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

as shown.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 22 In space Electrical 220. click the connector of the first receptacle. 26 Press Delete. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. in space Instruction 221. 29 In space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. as shown. select the PP-2B panel. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 28 In the drawing area. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you balance the loads for your design. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.

3 In the Electrical space. for Rating. 6 Click OK. click Rebalance Loads. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Finally. 1-#12. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. enter 30A. 1-#10. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to space Electrical 220. click Open. select panel LP-2B. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 1-#10. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded.rvt. Scroll down. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. After re-balancing loads. Click OK. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. the distribution is shifted. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 1-#12. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. Under Electrical-Loads. Had there been a greater imbalance.

under Electrical . 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. and click OK. 24 Click Select Panel. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. enter 40A. and click OK.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.Loads. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. for Rating. under Electrical . 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Next you create a panel schedule. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 14 Close the warning dialog. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load.Loads. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. enter 25A. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 Select panel PP-2B. for Rating. and click Finish Editing Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 Close the warning dialog. select the transformer TP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B.

select Berlin Sans FB. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. Under Header Text. click Edit. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. The Panel Schedule Report displays. enter 4 mm. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. enter 5 mm. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Under Body Text. for Font Size. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Select PP-2B. select Bold and Italic. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. click Training Files. under Other. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Font Size. Click OK. 10 Click OK twice. Under Header Text. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. click (Open).rvt. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 5 In the Project Browser. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. for Appearance. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 Close the report.Panel Schedules. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. for Font. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and open E601 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . expand Sheets (all).

and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. press TAB once. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1.rvt. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. select space Lounge 212. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. click Training Files. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. Expand Unassigned. In the System Browser. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. click (Open). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

16 Close the details dialog. 17 In the drawing area. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 On the Options Bar. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. select MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. under Warnings. 15 In the dialog. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Panel. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Checking Your Design | 215 . zoom to space Electrical 214. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. In the System Browser.

216 .

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .

218 .

rvt. planning is critical to a successful design. and click Properties. In this lesson.Design is open. 219 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. and click OK. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. in addition to loading existing families.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Adding a pipe size. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Plumbing Plan . you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 .Vent. you create a PVC pipe type.Sanitary. type PVC . click Duplicate. click Training Files. 4 In the Name dialog. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click PVC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.

Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.293 mm. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. for Material. 15 For System Type. PVC . 6 Click OK.DWV. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 27 For the new pipe size. 22 Click New Size. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. for Nominal. 10 On the Selection panel.Sch 40 . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.PVC . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. and click Main. select M_Tee Sanitary . Cross. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . select None. under Pipe Types. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. under Mechanical.Sch 40 . enter 46.DWV: Standard.Vent is listed. select Tee. click Modify. click Training Files.PVC . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. Tap. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For Offset. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . enter 54.Sch 40 . In the Project Browser. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.000 mm. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Plastic. and click OK. enter 45. enter -1250. 21 In the right pane. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 13 In the right panel. 18 For System Type. enter 10°. select Sanitary.5 In the Type Properties dialog. Tee. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 24 For Inside Diameter. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 17 In the left pane. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.rfa. and open Metric\M_Trap P . 25 For Outside.006 mm.PVC . select Sanitary. select Branch. click Pipe Settings. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.DWV: Standard. 26 Click OK.

Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. 221 . sanitary piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and hot and cold water piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. vent. add a hot water heater. Create the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

select Sanitary 107. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . select one of the components in the system. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. for example. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. and click OK. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 16 In the Select a System dialog. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base is placed. a toilet.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. as shown. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

30 Click Modify.05%. and click Settings. You accept this suggested solution. select PVC . enter -350 mm. select PVC . 28 On the Options Bar. enter -350 mm. 24 For Offset. 21 On Options Bar. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select Branch. click Solutions. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Slope. 23 For Pipe Type. and modify it to meet project requirements. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select Main. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Solution Type.Sanitary. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and click OK. 29 On the Options Bar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.Sanitary. enter -1225. for Diameter. select Intersections. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. and for Offset.19 On the Options Bar. 26 For Pipe Type. 25 In the left pane. 27 For Offset. enter 1. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. The default settings are automatically modified. select 100 mm.

32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl.

as shown. 34 Click Modify. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown.33 In the 3D view.

36 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. select the fitting and click to reorient it.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . When a fitting is reversed. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Overall. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.

adding sinks in the men’s room. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. you continue with the work from the last exercise. as shown. and check the slope control. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .

verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. as shown. and verify that Level 1 . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Design is open. in the Type Selector.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 5 On the Placement panel.Plumbing Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. under M_Lavatory . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select 560 mmx560 mm . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Element panel. click Training Files.rvt.Rectangular. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Public.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . enter 711.2. 8 Select the sink.7 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. On the Options Bar. select Multiple. and press Enter to create a second sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.

12 In the drawing area.2. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and press Enter to create the third sink. 11 In the System Browser. 15 Click the 3 sinks. Press Esc. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. enter 711. click Add To System.

as shown. 21 Select the tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 In the 3D view.16 On the Edit System panel. double-click 3D Plumbing . use the ViewCube to orient the view. 20 Select the fitting. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. click Finish Editing System. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design ➤ 3D Views. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. In the System Browser.Overall. under Design ➤ Plumbing .

and click Draw Pipe. 27 Click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. for Slope. enter 1. When you press the Spacebar.22 In the plan view. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .05%. 26 On the Options Bar. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). for Offset. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. press Spacebar. and click Apply. enter 760 mm. with the tee fitting selected. and click to draw the pipe.

DWV. 30 In the 3D view.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 29 In the Type Selector. select Standard.PVC . click to place the fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting.Sch 40 . and when the vertical center line displays. 31 Click Modify. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .

on the Options Bar. and press Enter. you add pipe segments to the double wye. right-click the right connector. 36 In the section view. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. 34 Press Esc. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option.33 With the fitting selected. double-click the section head to open the section view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. zoom in to the double wye fitting. for Offset. and press Enter. 37 Select the fitting. In the next steps. enter 150 mm. enter 305 mm. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view.

■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). as shown.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. and click to place the pipe. 42 Click Modify. 40 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method.

right-click the bottom connector. and click Draw Pipe. 48 Click Modify. 46 In the section view. and press Esc. 47 Move the cursor down. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. enter 150 mm. press Spacebar.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 49 Using the same method. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe.

select the P-Trap on the left.DWV. 54 Click Modify. 56 Using the same method. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under M_Trap P . 53 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 52 In the plan view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .PVC . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 55 In the 3D view. select Standard. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.Sch 40 . 51 In the Type Selector. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. Click Modify. In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. and press Enter. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 58 Using the same method. select the left P-Trap. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. connect the right sink to the double wye. enter 150 mm. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Click in the plan view.

On the Routing Solutions panel.■ In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select PVC Sanitary. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . Press Esc. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select a proposed solution. under Pipe Types. select the section of pipe you just drew. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks.

click Training Files. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.rvt. adjusting the sanitary stack. verify that 1. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. click Finish. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. and verify the slope. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 62 On the Options Bar.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope.05% is selected. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. for Slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.

10 In the 3D view. right-click the top connector. 7 On the Selection panel.Design. and click Draw Pipe.Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Select the tee. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Sch 40 . select the elbow fitting on the right. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . select the vertical stack.PVC . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and click to draw the pipe. as shown. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Design. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 3 In the Section view. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 9 In the Type Selector. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Overall.Floor level line.DWV. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select Standard. click Modify.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.43 In the 3D view.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 .

266 .

with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you can choose to save your work. If the tutorial training files are not present. You create a new pipe type.rvt. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. After finishing each exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. 2 Right-click Standard. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. However. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In this tutorial. go to http://www. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.autodesk. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. 267 . and click Duplicate. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model.

In this exercise. and then click OK. select Main. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. or architectural components. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. structural beams. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For System Type. For Pipe Type. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and enter Fire Protection Wet. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. In the left pane. select Fire Protection Wet. verify that 2800 is specified. verify that 2800 is selected. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For Pipe Type. select Fire Protection Wet. you create project parameters and work with schedules. and click Properties. Next. you modify the type properties of the pipe. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. For System Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 9 Click OK. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. duct. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. select Carbon Steel. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. In the next exercise. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. under Mechanical. for Material. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. click Rename. However. 6 In the Project Browser. For Offset. For Offset. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.

Fire Protection Piping Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . For Group parameter under. Under Categories. and then click OK. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 8 Using a crossing window. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. select space Instruction 221 as shown. select Fire Protection. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. select the upper half of the building. for Name.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Training Files. for Sprinkler Zone. click Add. under Fire Protection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Sprinkler Zone. indicating that it’s the active view. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click OK twice. select Spaces. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. 6 In the drawing area. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . the space crossing lines display. When you highlight a space using the cursor.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. enter Zone 1. right-click.

for Sprinkler Zone. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Zone 2. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 In the Filter dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. verify that only Spaces are selected. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. under Fire Protection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. you create schedules for sprinkler design. click Training Files. including a calculated value parameter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Fire Protection. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. to which you add various parameters. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Zone 1. 13 Using the same method. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and then click OK. and then access instance properties. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .

For Rounding. enter Light. select Maximum Spacing. For Group parameter under. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Fire Protection. enter Maximum Spacing. The schedule displays. select mm. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. Obstructed-Combustible. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. double-click on each column separator. select Length. Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Millimeters.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select 0 decimal places. click the Formatting tab. 9 On the Formatting tab. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 7 Click OK. 6 Using the same method.Fire Protection Piping Plan . enter Protection Area Construction Type. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice. and click Field Format. click Add Parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 10 In the Format dialog. Click OK. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Select Schedule keys. and on the ribbon. For Name. For Type of Parameter. select Spaces.Design is highlighted. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Key name. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. 14 Select the new header. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. For Units. For Unit symbol. for Name. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule.

add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Click OK. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. enter 4575. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. select Spaces. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Unobstructed Ordinary. For Name. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. and press Enter. 16 Using the same method. enter 40. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In the Maximum Coverage Area column.

double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Type. select Common. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. click . The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). In the Fields dialog. enter Minimum Sprinklers.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Fixed. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Units. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. Click OK. For Discipline. 22 Click OK twice. 20 On the Formatting tab. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Rounding. select 0 decimal place. select Area. Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Formula. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. under Available fields. and click OK. select Number. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and click Field Format.

For Fields. For Fields. Under Field formatting. For Then by (second instance). At the bottom of the dialog. select Level. select Sprinkler Zone. select Number. and click View Properties. under Other. select Minimum Sprinklers. verify that Use default settings is selected. Select Header and Blank line.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and then select Hidden field. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Sprinkler Zone. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Field Format. select Grand totals. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. click Edit. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. for Sorting/Grouping. ■ In the Format dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Level. select Hidden field. Select Header and Blank line. For Then by. for Sort by. and select Totals only.

double-click Type. for Filter by. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . and select Totals only. delete the word Maximum. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. click Edit. right-click the schedule. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. On the Formatting tab. select Calculate totals. and click View Properties. for Embedded Schedule. System Name.27 In the drawing area. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. for Available fields. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and click View Properties. For Category. and Count. 30 Click OK twice. for Filter. select Sprinklers. for Fields. Under Field formatting. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Embedded Schedule. click Edit. select Grand totals. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. select Level equals Level 2. select Count. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other.

click in the floor plan to make it the active view. under Identity Data. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. double-click FP . under Identity Data. but their values are not determined. 44 In the schedule. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 41 In the plan view. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). select Light. for Protection Area Construction Type. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary. select Ordinary. 52 Click OK. 48 In the floor plan. Unobstructed. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. As a result. and click OK. and the spacing parameter values are evident.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 43 Click Cancel. select space 221 Instruction. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 46 With the space still selected. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type.Fire Protection Plan Design. Unobstructed. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. and access the instance properties. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. 50 Access the instance properties. select space 221 Instruction. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

279 . If the tutorial training files are not present. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. go to http://www. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. However. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. and double-click Level 2 . Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. click Training Files. As you place the sprinklers. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. methodology.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will understand the process. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. you can choose to save your work. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. At the end of this tutorial.rvt. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.autodesk. By following the recommended workflow. As you create the system. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. After finishing each exercise.

the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. After placing the initial sprinkler. 3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When this happens. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. select the sprinklers that you placed. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 11 In the drawing area. and click to place 3 sprinklers. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. while pressing Ctrl. Also. 9 In space Instruction 202. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. and 207. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 10 Press Esc twice. 206. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. verify that Constrain is cleared.

Fire Protection Piping Plan . 17 In the Project Browser. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 200B. and 200C). 16 Close the ceiling plan view. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. as shown. open Design ➤ FP . Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design. specify a vertical offset. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you place non-hosted sprinklers. and then press Esc. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 18 Type WT. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Next.

and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.FP_Ceiling view. enter 2900 mm. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. 29 Press Esc. under Constraints. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . for Offset. and with piping (physical connection). 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Click OK. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and press Enter.0. This number is determined in the schedule. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Notice that the schedule updates. enter 4100. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. enter 11. and click Element Properties. Next. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. In this exercise. you adjust the offset.19 In the floor plan. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. In the next exercise. move the cursor to the right. For Number. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. After creating the logical connection.

284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. click Training Files. and select Piping. However. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. As you assign sprinklers to systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 5 Right-click the header. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder.Design is highlighted. as shown. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Fire Protection Plan . Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Unlike logical connections (systems). Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 1 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click View ➤ Systems. indicating that it’s the active view. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building.

named Fire Protection Wet. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. and click Select. within the Piping Systems folder. indicating the logical connection. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 11 With the system still selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. press Tab. In the System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and select the system. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. place the cursor over a sprinkler. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. select an initial piping layout. Creating a Piping System | 285 . TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Next. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers.

21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. click Settings. 22 On the Options Bar. system equipment. In the left pane. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. 15 In the drawing area. enter FP Wet_Zone2. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 19 Click OK. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. When the layout is finished. and on the Options Bar. click Solutions. select 150 mm. 12 On the Options Bar. For Offset. and number of elements in the system. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.0 is specified. and a piping layout preview displays. as shown. verify that 2800. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). click Place Base. verify that Main is selected. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. enter -3650.The Edit Piping System panel displays. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. select Branch. 13 In the System Browser. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 24 On the Generate Layout panel. for System Name.Wet is selected. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 23 For Offset. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. providing system editing tools. For Pipe Type. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter.

the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. verify that Network is selected. In general. and select solution 4. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. click Modify. and green represents branch lines).25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. On the Generate Layout panel. A (parallel movement control) displays. Creating a Piping System | 287 .

The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. as shown. 29 Click Finish Layout. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. select a different layout solution.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. Either relocate the system components. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . or that offset elevations are incorrect. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. or manually modify the pipe. 32 If necessary.

Design is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. and select the elbow fitting as shown. 2 Zoom in. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.rvt. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.Fire Protection Piping Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .33 Close the file with or without saving it. and various manual pipe creation tools. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and then you create piping to physically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. the Connect Into tool. Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. 3 If necessary. click Training Files.

290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and pipe or duct is created. click Finish Editing System. radiators. air terminals. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and so on) are logically connected by a system. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. you can select the pipe or duct. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 8 In the corridor. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. click Add To System. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). mechanical equipment. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 9 On the Edit System panel. or a system component to display system tools. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 5 In the drawing area.

16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Finish Layout. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. verify that Solutions is selected. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 14 Close the System Browser. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier.11 On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Network is selected. 23 View the result in the 3D view. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 12 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 18 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . and select solution 5. and then tile the views. 21 In the Piping Plan. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. for Solution Type. 20 Open Design ➤ FP .

and click Draw Pipe. and then press Esc. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Select the sprinkler. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. for Offset. 29 Using the same method. select 2800. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 28 In the drawing area. right-click.24 In the Piping Plan. 27 On the Options Bar. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Scale. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select 1 : 50. click Training Files.rvt. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 4 On the Options Bar. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Because the whole system highlights.Design is highlighted. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 31 In the plan view. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.

294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 8 Right-click.6 Press Esc. and click View Properties. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. double-click on the section head to open the section view.

and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. enter 2135. for Sub-Discipline. and click Apply Default View Template. For View Classification. and click Draw Pipe.Fire Protection Plan . select Design. Click OK.Design. Under Identity Data. 19 Make Level 2 . 22 In the drawing area. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and press Enter. and then click Modify. 17 Move the cursor up. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. select MEP Section. and then right-click the top connector. 12 If necessary.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. 10 In the Project Browser. right-click Design ➤ FP . enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template. 13 Select the elbow fitting.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 14 Select the tee fitting. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . drag the top section boundary line up. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for View Name. select FP . 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 Press Spacebar.Design the active view. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown.

and click Draw Pipe. 26 On the Options Bar.23 In the section view. and then click Modify. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select .Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. for Diameter. verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps).

verify that M_Gate Valve . 32 In the Open dialog. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. as shown. and then click Modify. 33 In the Type Selector. 31 In the alert dialog. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . click Yes to load a family. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe.29 Close the section view.50 mm is selected.rfa. and click Open.

2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. click Training Files. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ 3D Views. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers.rvt. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise.

The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). 4 In the floor plan view. 8 Click Modify. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. height. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. 6 In the Filter dialog. Changing the diameter. select 25mm. click Check None. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. and click OK. for Diameter. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 7 On the Options Bar. width. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. or width. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. or height.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. width. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 .

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. 12 If necessary. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. NOTE Tags are view specific. . 18 In the 3D view. Clear Leader. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. By hiding the linked file.rfa. 17 On the View Control Bar. select the linked architectural file. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. click to place the tag. They display only in the view in which they were placed. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. Press Esc. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. and click Open. and after each segment highlights. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. The main piping is selected and displays in red. select 100mm. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. and when the section highlights. press Tab. for Diameter. 21 On the Options Bar.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler.

and then tag the piping as shown. as shown. 23 Close the 3D view.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 24 In the drawing area. 26 Using the same method. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. select 40mm. The pipe diameter is modified. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. for Diameter. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. and maximize the floor plan. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 On the Options Bar.

The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. For additional practice. In this tutorial. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. You added tags to pipes. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. you created a wet fire protection system. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. In this exercise. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.

304 .

add annotations and dimensions. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

306 .

and view references. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. matchlines. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. and click Rename. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and click Properties. If the view included detail graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click Training Files. dependent views.rvt. right-click Copy of Level 1. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and apply a view template. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 307 .

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 3 In the Rename View dialog. more focused. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . create dependent views for areas B and C. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 6 In the Project Browser. views and put them on the sheet. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 7 Close the file without saving. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 10 In the drawing area. 4 Using the same method. 9 Click OK. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited.rvt. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. as shown. and click OK. click Training Files. and click Apply Default View Template. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and click Rename. and then press Esc. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.

select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 13 Press Esc twice. select 11. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. In the Color dialog. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. click the current value. and click OK. Click OK. For Line Pattern. For Line Weight. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. select black. and then press Esc. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 19 In the drawing area. select Double Dash .

21 Using the same method. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. as shown. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 25 Using the same method. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. for Target view. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. on the Options Bar. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.20 Select the upper view reference and. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline.

for View Name. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and zoom to each of the view references. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. click Training Files. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click 3D Plumbing. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. enter Plumbing Isometric . 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . and select the section box. 2 Zoom in. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. select Plumbing Isometric. 27 Using the same method. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 4 In the Project Browser. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203.Domestic Water. and click Properties. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m.rvt. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

Click Apply. select Documentation. select Dash. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. select Plumbing. and click to select it. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and then click OK. for View Classification. The section crop lines no longer display. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. select 3. Click OK. For Pattern. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. 10 Right-click.Domestic Water. For Sub-Discipline. right-click Plumbing Isometric .

and click to select it. press Tab 3 times. 13 Using the same method. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.

14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. 15 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). and click to select it.

verify that Common is selected. click on the Format value.Isometric.5mm Arial. 19 Using methods learned previously. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. and for Default View Template. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. specify Plumbing . and in the view properties. For Slope. On the View Control Bar. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. select 1. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline.16 Press Esc.Sanitary Waste. and in the Type Selector. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units.

as shown. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. and click to place the spot slope annotation.rvt.■ In the Format dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 26 Press Esc twice. select To the nearest 10. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. and then place the callout view on a sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When the view is associated with a sheet. for Rounding. 22 Click OK twice.

7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating Callout Views | 317 . 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. for Scale. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. select 1 : 50. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).

change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. Expand the Callout Boundary category and.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. and select the viewport. drag it to the sheet. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. using the same method. double-click M601 .Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. select 5. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. under Sheets (all). for Line Weight. Click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 17 In the Project Browser. for View Name. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. enter WSHP PART PLAN. Click OK. Creating Callout Views | 319 . and click Apply Default View Template. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click the callout view.

21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.

26 In the Rename View dialog. right-click the detail view. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. under Names. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 25 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 321 . enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. and click Rename. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply View Template.

322 .

and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. work with model-based components. Creating Annotations In this exercise. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. click Training Files. linetypes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. symbols. and annotation to create a legend. as shown. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. 323 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. duct tags. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes.

6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 9 Press Esc twice. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 8 With the text still selected. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.

The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 16 In the drawing area. verify that Leader is cleared. and a segment of rectangular duct. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a return diffuser. a segment of round duct. select a supply diffuser. and then click Right Straight. Creating Annotations | 325 . as shown. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 15 On the Options Bar. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

for Ducts. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 21 In the Load Family dialog. click Load.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. as shown. and click Open.rfa. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 22 In the Tags dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. under Category. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. clear Leader. If necessary. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 20 In the Tags dialog.17 Click Modify. 25 In the drawing area. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

Leader. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select Horizontal. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and then press Esc. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Creating Annotations | 327 . 31 On the Options Bar. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 32 In the drawing area. and Attached End.26 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A.

select Free End. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 36 Press Esc twice. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. for Leader.33 On the Options Bar. as shown. 34 In the drawing area.

and all elements of that type are affected. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 40 Using the method learned previously. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. for Leader Arrowhead. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 37 In the drawing area. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. lay out. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. not simply an instance property. That’s because you changed a type property. Creating Dimensions | 329 . and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. you use temporary dimensions to locate. select the last tag placed. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. and lock lighting fixtures.

5 Click to create a permanent dimension. select the dimension line. and then select the interior face of the wall. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 12 Click EQ. 13 Press Esc. 14 Using the same method. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. On the Options Bar.

and press Enter. linework. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. click Training Files.rvt. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. 17 Press Esc. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and notes. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Because the dimensions are locked.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. 20 Using the same methods. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. annotation symbols.9). and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. enter 2430. Creating a Legend | 331 . click the 3 interior locks on the line. and offset them from the wall. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.

click below the title to place the diffuser. Click OK. 10 Using the same method.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. select 1 : 50. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . ■ 9 In the drawing area. enter Diffuser Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click in the drawing area. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. For Scale. select Floor Plan. For View. and select 1.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 .200 Neck.

click next to the top diffuser.11 Press Esc. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. and select 1. 14 In the drawing area. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Creating a Legend | 333 .

26 Press Esc. The selected detail lines are now thin. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 24 Select the component’s break line.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 22 Zoom in to the copied component.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 21 Press Esc. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.DROP and its text note. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. and then press Esc.

and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then click Modify.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 34 Using the method learned previously. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.MECHANICAL LEGEND.30 Select Spot Elevation . Creating a Legend | 335 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol.

No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.39 With the viewport still selected. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select Title w Line . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc.

Detailing 15 In this lesson. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . and text. 337 . detail groups. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A drafting view using detail components. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. click Training Files. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. A detail callout that references another view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.113 East elevation view.

3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader. place Power Riser . Next. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. select each of the 2 panelboards. 5 In the drawing area.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. and then modify and align the views. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and click to place it. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 8 Using the same method.113 East on the sheet. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 4 On the Options Bar.

12 Select the Level 1 line. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Right-click. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. for Title on Sheet. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. under Identity Data. and click Deactivate View.9 Press Esc. giving the appearance of a single view. select the 113 North view. and click OK. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click Activate View. right-click.

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 21 Using the drag control. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. In the next exercise. right-click. you add wiring to the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 19 Select the Level 1 line. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Press Esc. and select Title w Line .Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and click Activate View. as shown. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. right-click. select the 113 East elevation view.

draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. Under Modify Subcategories. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. select 6. click Training Files. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. click New. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 2 Close the Project Browser. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. In the New Subcategory dialog. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . As you draw. In the Line Styles dialog. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. enter Electrical Power. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. expand Lines. 9 Beginning at the transformer.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. as shown. notice that there are no snaps active. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Chain is selected. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down.113 North view. for Name. for Line Weight. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m.

enter 3mm. as shown. for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar.10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. so that the result is as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.

select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 28 Click above the cap. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 On the Options Bar.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 29 Click Modify. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select Multiple. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and select 1. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. you can ensure that they stay together. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. Press Esc. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 40 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . for Offset. 42 On the Options Bar. click on the length dimension value. enter 7. change the length of the bottom line to 3. and press Enter. You enter exact values for each line length. enter 3. 39 Move the cursor to the right. and then press Esc. and press Enter. Using the same method. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line.0. enter 12.

53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 51 Using the method learned previously. 54 Select the group. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. enter Ground. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 50 With the group selected. 47 In the drawing area.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and then press Esc. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click OK. while pressing Ctrl. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 52 Select the detail group. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. select all 3 lines. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 46 In the Project Browser. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. for Name. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.

Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. In later exercises. and will place it on sheet E01. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view.

expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and Left sides converge. and then press Esc. Back. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. for Name. 5 Right-click the copy. click Home. Walkthroughs. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). 4 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. select 3D Views. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 2 Zoom in to view the section. and click Apply View Template. 3 Select the section box. 8 On the ViewCube. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. and double click Typical Make Up Air.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and then click the corner where the Top.

and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). select 3D HVAC Iso. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Move the cursor down and to the left. Click OK. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. 15 Using the same method. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Typical. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper).■ ■ Under Names. and click to specify the second leader point. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point.

Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 23 Click on the crop region. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. as shown. under Extents. as shown. and under Extents. and then click OK.18 Press Esc. 19 Complete the text labels. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . To rotate and reposition a text label. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. select Crop Region Visible.

you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Activate View. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and under Extents. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. 30 On the View Control Bar. select Crop View and Section Box. Place a detail component. clear Crop Region Visible. click Training Files. 29 Right click the view. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click Deactivate View.25 Click OK. scroll down. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . and click OK. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. and click View Properties. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. 32 In the Instance Properties. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 33 Right-click the view. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser.

3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. for Sub-Discipline. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 9 Zoom in to the component. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. as shown. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. as the rectangle start point. right-click the view name. and click Properties. For View Classification. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 13 In the drawing area. select Documentation. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click the point at the top of the drain. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click OK. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. For Scale. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. select Plumbing. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 12 On the Element panel. select 1 : 5. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

and then press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. for Type.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down.I. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.P. 22 Click Modify. select C. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 With the filled region still selected. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. and click OK. 20 Select 1. 21 In the drawing area. Concrete.

27 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Multiple.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 28 Click Modify. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 34 Press Esc. and then click to select them. (Line). 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 31 On the Options Bar. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 23 In the drawing area. select the filled region. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point.

36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 40 Click Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then press Esc. and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line.

as shown. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. draw wide detail lines as shown. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.D. (Rectangle). 49 Click Modify. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. select the Flashing Membrane group. and click OK. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. and then click to select them.. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 45 Using the method learned previously. press Tab to highlight the chain. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 52 In the Create Group dialog. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.

as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 61 Using the same method. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. press Spacebar twice. 55 Press Esc.

66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. select Leader and Free End.62 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. 67 On the Options Bar. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and use the grips to resize the masking region. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.

74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 71 Click Modify. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and click to specify the text insertion point. 78 Move the cursor to the left.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 72 If necessary. and click to specify the second leader point. 76 To select the leader start point. 81 Select the text note. 80 Press Esc twice.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. and then click OK. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. select 15000 (Division 15 .70 In the Keynotes dialog. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

and click to place it. 90 Press Esc.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. select the view title. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 . and then press Esc twice. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 88 In the drawing area.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful